660603

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/189
Pagina verder
1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Camera User Guide
© CANON INC. 2017 CEL-SX1JA210
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Instructions”
(
=
14) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LHE
Wrist Strap
* Donotpeelotheadhesivecoveringfromabatterypack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veriedtoworkwiththecamera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
andaliates,anditsdistributorsarenotliableforanyconsequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing
or recording is intended solely for personal use.
● For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixelsmeetdesignspecications,inrarecasessomepixelsmaybe
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate
cameradamageoraectrecordedimages.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Up button (12) on back
[ ] Left button (8) on back
[ ] Right button (13) on back
[ ] Down button (15) on back
[ ] Control dial (7) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Part Names
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
5
) (
7
) (
8
) (
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
)
(
4
)
(
6
)
(
1
)
(1) Microphone
(2) Lamp
(3) Lens
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Movie button
(6) Mode dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) ON/OFF button
(9) Flash
(10)
(N-Mark)*
(11) [
(Flash pop up)] switch
(12) Tripod socket
(13) Memory card/battery cover
(14) Strap mount
* Used with NFC features (
=
115).
(
1
) (
2
) (
3
) (
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
16
)
(1) Screen (monitor)
(2) Speaker
(3) DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMI
TM
terminal
(5) Serial number (Body number)
(6) [
(Framing Assist – Seek)] /
[
(Single-image erase)] button
(7) Control dial
(8) [
(Macro)] /
[
(Manual focus)] / Left button
(9) Indicator
(10) [
(Playback)] button
(11) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(12) [
(Exposure compensation)] /
[
(Story Highlights)] /
Up button
(13) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(14) FUNC. (Function) / SET button
(15) [
(Information)] /
Down button
(16) [
] button
● You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Instructions .................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 17
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 17
Holding the Camera ...................................................................17
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................18
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................19
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 19
Changing the Date and Time .................................................20
Display Language ...................................................................... 21
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 21
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................21
Viewing ......................................................................................23
Erasing Images .....................................................................24
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 25
On/O ..................................................................................... 25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 26
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................26
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 26
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 26
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 27
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 27
Adjusting the Screen Angle .................................................... 28
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 28
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 29
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 30
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 31
Clock ...................................................................................... 32
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 33
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 33
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................33
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 35
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................36
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................36
Still Images ............................................................................ 36
Movies ...................................................................................36
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 37
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................38
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................38
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................39
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 39
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 39
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................53
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 54
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......54
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 55
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................55
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................55
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 56
ApplyingEectsAutomatically(CreativeShot) ...................... 56
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot ...........................56
ChoosingEects .......................................................................57
RecordingMovieswithaVarietyofEects................................57
Creative Shot Movie Playback ..............................................57
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait)........ 58
Moving Subjects (Sports) ....................................................... 59
SpecicScenes ...................................................................... 59
ApplyingSpecialEects ......................................................... 60
ShootingwithaSkinSmoothingEect(SmoothSkin) .............. 61
ShootingwithaFish-EyeLensEect(Fish-EyeEect) ............61
ShotsResemblingMiniatureModels(MiniatureEect) .............62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................62
ShootingwithaToyCameraEect(ToyCameraEect) ...........63
ShootingwithaSoftFocusEect ..............................................63
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................64
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 64
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 64
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile) .........................64
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) .......... 65
EasilyReacquiringSubjectsafterManualZooming
(Framing Assist – Seek) ............................................................40
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement
(Auto Zoom) ...............................................................................40
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ............................41
EasilyReacquiringSubjectswithAutoZooming
(Seek Assist) ..............................................................................42
Adding a Date Stamp ................................................................42
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 43
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................44
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................44
Continuous Shooting .................................................................44
Image Display during Playback .............................................45
Using Face ID......................................................................... 45
Personal Information .................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 46
Shooting ....................................................................................47
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................48
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 49
Image Customization Features .............................................. 50
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 50
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) .......... 50
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting
Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) ..................................50
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........51
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................51
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 52
Displaying Grid Lines .................................................................52
Deactivating Auto Level .............................................................52
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 53
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................53
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................77
Center ....................................................................................77
Face AiAF .............................................................................. 77
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....................78
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................79
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................79
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 80
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus ......................................................................................... 80
Flash....................................................................................... 81
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................81
Auto .......................................................................................81
On ..........................................................................................81
Slow Synchro ........................................................................81
O .......................................................................................... 81
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................82
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 82
Other Settings ........................................................................ 83
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 83
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 83
Tv, Av, and M Mode ......................................................... 84
SpecicShutterSpeeds([Tv]Mode)...................................... 84
SpecicApertureValues([Av]Mode) ..................................... 85
SpecicShutterSpeedsandApertureValues([M]Mode) ..... 85
Adjusting the Flash Output ........................................................86
Playback Mode ................................................................ 87
Viewing ................................................................................... 87
Switching Display Modes ...........................................................88
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ...................... 89
Histogram ..............................................................................89
GPS Information Display .......................................................89
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer) ...................................................................66
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 67
Recording Movies in Standard Mode ........................................67
Shooting Movies with Smoother Motion ................................67
Locking or Changing Image Brightness ................................67
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter ..................................................68
Correcting Severe Camera Shake ........................................68
Sound Settings ..........................................................................68
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................68
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 68
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode .......................................69
PlaybackEects ....................................................................69
P Mode ............................................................................. 70
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 70
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 71
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 71
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................71
Changing the Metering Method .................................................71
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................72
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 72
Image Colors .......................................................................... 73
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................73
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 73
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................74
Custom Color.........................................................................74
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 75
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................75
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 75
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................76
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................77
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Rotating Images ................................................................... 100
Using the Menu .......................................................................100
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................100
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 101
Using the Menu .......................................................................101
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 102
Resizing Images ......................................................................102
Cropping ..................................................................................102
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................103
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................ 104
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................104
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 105
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 106
Erasing Movie Chapters ..........................................................107
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 108
Choosing Themes for Albums .............................................108
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 109
Creating Your Own Albums ...................................................... 110
Combining Short Clips........................................................... 111
Wireless Features ......................................................... 112
Available Wireless Features ..................................................112
Using Wi-Fi Features ............................................................... 112
Using Bluetooth
®
Features ...................................................... 112
Sending Images to a Smartphone ......................................... 113
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled Smartphone ...... 113
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ....... 115
ConnectingviaNFCWhenCameraIsOorinShooting
Mode ................................................................................... 115
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 117
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu .......................... 117
Using Another Access Point .................................................... 119
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies) .............................................................. 89
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................90
Viewing by Date .....................................................................90
Checking People Detected in Face ID .......................................90
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 91
Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 91
FindingImagesMatchingSpeciedConditions .........................91
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .......................................92
Editing Face ID Information .................................................... 93
Changing Names ....................................................................... 93
Erasing Names ..........................................................................93
Image Viewing Options .......................................................... 94
Magnifying Images ....................................................................94
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................... 94
Changing Slideshow Settings ................................................95
AutoPlaybackofRelatedImages(SmartShue) ....................95
Protecting Images .................................................................. 96
Using the Menu .........................................................................96
Choosing Images Individually .................................................... 96
Selecting a Range .....................................................................97
Protecting All Images at Once ...................................................97
Clearing All Protection at Once .............................................97
Erasing Images ...................................................................... 98
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ...............................................98
Choosing a Selection Method ...............................................98
Choosing Images Individually ................................................99
Selecting a Range .................................................................99
Specifying All Images at Once ...............................................99
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 136
Geotagging Images When You Shoot .....................................136
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a Smartphone ............138
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi ........................................138
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth ..................................138
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 139
Editing Connection Information ...............................................139
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................140
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................140
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones .................140
Changing the Camera Nickname ............................................141
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................141
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via Bluetooth .......... 142
Setting Menu .................................................................. 143
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 143
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................143
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................143
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................144
Date and Time .........................................................................144
World Clock .............................................................................144
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 145
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................145
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................145
Screen Brightness ...................................................................145
Hiding the Start-Up Screen ......................................................146
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 146
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 147
File Numbering ........................................................................147
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 148
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................148
CheckingCerticationLogos ................................................... 148
Previous Access Points ...........................................................120
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 120
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 120
Installing CameraWindow ....................................................120
ConguringtheComputerforaWi-FiConnection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................121
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................122
ConrmingAccessPointCompatibility ................................ 122
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................122
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................124
Previous Access Points .......................................................125
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 126
Registering Web Services .......................................................126
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................126
Registering Other Web Services .........................................128
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................128
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 129
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 131
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 132
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................132
Selecting a Range ...............................................................133
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................133
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................133
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........134
Adding Comments ................................................................... 134
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 134
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 134
Preparing the Camera .........................................................134
Preparing the Computer ......................................................135
Sending Images .......................................................................135
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....136
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................161
ConguringPrintSettings ....................................................161
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................161
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 162
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................162
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................162
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 162
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................163
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................163
Adding Images Individually ..................................................163
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................163
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................163
Appendix ........................................................................ 164
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 164
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 168
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 170
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................170
Battery Level .......................................................................170
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................171
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................171
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 172
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................172
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................173
Shooting Tab ............................................................................175
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 179
Playback Tab ...........................................................................179
Print Tab ..................................................................................180
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu .................................................. 180
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 180
Specications ....................................................................... 181
Image Sensor ......................................................................181
Display Language .................................................................... 148
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 149
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 149
Restoring All Camera Defaults ............................................149
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions ......................... 149
Accessories ................................................................... 150
System Map ......................................................................... 150
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 151
Power Supplies ........................................................................151
Other Accessories ...................................................................152
Printers ....................................................................................152
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 152
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 152
Playback on a TV ....................................................................152
PlaybackonaHigh-DenitionTV ........................................ 152
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 153
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ............................155
Using the Software ............................................................... 155
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 156
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................156
Installing the Software .........................................................156
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 156
Printing Images .................................................................... 157
Easy Print ................................................................................157
ConguringPrintSettings ........................................................ 158
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................159
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............159
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 160
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................160
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 160
Movie Printing Options ........................................................160
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Lens .....................................................................................181
Shutter ................................................................................. 181
Aperture ...............................................................................181
Flash ....................................................................................181
Monitor.................................................................................182
Shooting ..............................................................................182
Recording ............................................................................182
Power ..................................................................................183
Interface ..............................................................................183
Operating Environment .......................................................183
Dimensions (CIPA compliant) .............................................. 183
Weight (CIPA compliant) ......................................................184
Battery Pack NB-13L ........................................................... 184
Battery Charger CB-2LHE ................................................... 184
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30E ...................................184
Index..................................................................................... 185
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others).................................................................................187
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ................................. 187
Security Precautions ...........................................................187
Third-Party Software ...........................................................188
Personal Information and Security Precautions ..................189
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................189
Disclaimer ............................................................................189
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
33,
=
35
● Seeseveraleectsappliedtoeachshot,usingcamera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
56
● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
-
=
58
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
59)
Matchingspecicscenes
Sports
(
=
59)
Night Scenes
(
=
59)
Low Light
(
=
59)
Fireworks
(
=
59)
Applyingspecialeects
Vivid Colors
(
=
60)
PosterEect
(
=
60)
Smooth Skin
(
=
61)
Fish-EyeEect
(
=
61)
MiniatureEect
(
=
62)
ToyCameraEect
(
=
63)
Soft Focus
(
=
63)
Monochrome
(
=
64)
● Focus on faces
-
=
33,
=
59,
=
77
● Withoutusingtheash(FlashO)
-
=
33
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
43,
=
66
● Add a date stamp
-
=
42
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
35
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Save
● Save images to a computer
-
=
156
Use Wi-Fi Features
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
113
● Share images online
-
=
126
● Send images to a computer
-
=
134
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
87
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
94
● On a TV
-
=
152
● On a computer
-
=
156
● Browsethroughimagesquickly
-
=
91
● Erase images
-
=
98
● Create an album automatically
-
=
108
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
-
=
33,
=
67
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
87
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
157
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Observe the following instructions when using commercially available
batteries or provided battery packs.
- Usebatteries/batterypacksonlywiththeirspeciedproduct.
- Donotheatbatteries/batterypacksorexposethemtore.
- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery
chargers.
- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with
metallic pins or other metal objects.
- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals
with tape or other means.
Thismaycauseelectricshock,explosionorre.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or
clothing,ushtheexposedareathoroughlywithrunningwater.Incaseof
eyecontact,ushthoroughlywithcopiousamountsofcleanrunningwater
and seek immediate medical assistance.
● Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger.
● Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or
AC adapter.
- Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power
outlet using a dry cloth.
- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the
power outlet.
- Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come
into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
- Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a
power outlet during lightning storms.
- Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage,
break or modify the power cord.
- Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or
shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.
- Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long
periods of time.
Thismaycauseelectricshock,explosionorre.
Safety Instructions
● Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product
safely.
● Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of
the product or others.
WARNING
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
● Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The accessory shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed,
seek immediate medical assistance.
● Useonlypowersourcesspeciedinthisinstructionmanualforuse
with the product.
● Do not disassemble or modify the product.
● Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
● Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
● Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as
the presence of smoke or a strange smell.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner
to clean the product.
● Donotgettheproductwet.Donotinsertforeignobjectsorliquidsinto
the product.
● Donotusetheproductwhereammablegasesmaybepresent.
Thismaycauseelectricshock,explosionorre.
● Forproductsfeaturingaviewnder,donotlookthroughtheviewnder
at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and
otherstrongarticiallightsources.
This may harm your vision.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
cleardayoranintensearticiallightsource.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location,
be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● Wipeoanydust,grime,orotherforeignmatterontheashwitha
cotton swab or cloth.
Theheatemittedfromtheashmaycauseforeignmattertosmokeorthe
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contactingothermetalmaterialsmayleadtoreorexplosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use.
Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheatanddistort,resultinginre.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating,
orexplosion,resultinginproductdamageorre.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
havedierentlevelsofchargetogether,anddonotuseoldand
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin
for extended periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness
and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or
similarequipmentisrecommendedwhenusingtheproductinhotplaces
and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
● Followanyindicationstoturnotheproductinplaceswhereitsuseis
forbidden.
Notdoingsomaycauseotherequipmenttomalfunctionduetotheeect
of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
CAUTION
Denotes the risk of injury.
● Donotretheashneartheeyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
● Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any
product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product.
Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong
impacts.
● Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
● Flashemitshightemperatureswhenred.Keepngers,anyother
partofyourbody,andobjectsawayfromtheashunitwhiletaking
pictures.
Thismaycauseburnsormalfunctionoftheash.
● Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low
temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury
when touched.
16
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
17
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
● Thread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your wrist.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raisedtheash,donotrestyourngers
on it.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (
=
183) and “Battery Charger CB-2LHE” (
=
184).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60Hz).Forpoweroutletsinadierentformat,usea
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
146).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● Whenchargingisnished,thelampturns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LHE
(
2
)
(
1
)
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the terminals
in the position shown, hold the battery
lock toward (1) and insert the battery pack
toward (2) until the lock clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correctposition.Alwaysconrmthatthe
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
● Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Recording” (
=
182).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ]
tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
19) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insertachargedbatterypack,evenifthecameraislefto.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
● Whennished,pressthe[
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ]buttonwhennished.
Afteraconrmationmessage,thesetting
screen is no longer displayed.
● Toturnothecamera,presstheON/OFF
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,
and viewing them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Forfullyautomaticselectionoftheoptimalsettingsforspecicscenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject.
The camera will make a slight clicking
noise as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Oncerecordingbegins,takeyournger
othemoviebutton.
2) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If[Raisetheash]isdisplayed,move
the [
]switchtoraisetheash.Itwillre
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
theash,pushitdownwithyournger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
whenyouhaveraisedtheash,itres
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
isnished,[
] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browsethroughimagesquickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Moviesareidentiedbya[ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
98).
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
On/O
Shooting Mode
● Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
● Toturnthecamerao,presstheON/OFF
button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● Toturnthecamerao,pressthe[
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
26).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
isinPlaybackmode.Youcanturnthecameraowhenthelensis
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
requiredfortheshot.Itmaytakelongerinsomeshootingscenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
thescreen(DisplayO)andthenturnsitselfoafteraspecicperiodof
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turnsitselfo.Toactivatethescreenandprepareforshootingwhen
thescreenisobutthelensisstillout,presstheshutterbuttonhalfway
(
=
26).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
Thecameraturnsitselfoautomaticallyafteraboutveminutesof
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
DisplayO,ifyouprefer(
=
145).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
112), or when connected to a computer
(
=
156).
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (
=
170).
Information is displayed
No information is displayed
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
aectrecordedimages.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
88).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
2
)
1
)
3
)
(
)
(
5
(
6
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
21,
=
33,
=
35).
(2) Creative Shot Mode
Seeseveraleectsappliedto
each shot automatically (
=
56).
(3) Self Portrait Mode
Shoot yourself under optimal
settings (
=
58).
(4) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(
=
59).
(5) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specicscenes,oraddavarietyof
eects(
=
59).
(6) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
67).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(7) P, Tv, Av, and M Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
(
=
70,
=
84).
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using the FUNC. Menu
CongurecommonlyusedshootingfunctionsthroughtheFUNC.menuas
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
173).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item (1), and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
● Available options (2) are listed next to
menu items, on the right.
● Depending on the menu item, functions
canbespeciedsimplybypressingthe
[
] or [ ] button, or another screen is
displayedforconguringthefunction.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● Items labeled with a [
] icon can be
conguredbypressingthe[ ]
button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
(
1
)(
2
)
Adjusting the Screen Angle
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
● The screen can be opened to about 180°.
● When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
● Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the
camera.
● To cancel reverse display, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[ReverseDisplay]>[O].
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using the Menu Screen
Congureavarietyofcamerafunctionsthroughthemenuscreenas
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
175 –
=
179).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
● After you have pressed the [
][ ]
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rstpressthe[
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Conrm your choice and exit.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showingtheoptionyoucongured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
149).
30
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
45),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
122), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a key labeled
with a character, and then press the [ ]
button repeatedly to enter the character
you want.
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
Entering Line Breaks
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Switching Input Modes
● To switch to other kinds of characters
(such as numbers or symbols) on this
screen, choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● To enter uppercase letters, choose [
]
and press the [ ] button.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
(
1
)
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Conrm your choice and exit.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
149).
31
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures
(
=
84,
=
85), connected to a computer
(
=
156), connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi,
ordisplayo(
=
26,
=
145)
Orange On Charging via a compact power adapter
● Whentheindicatorblinksgreen,donotturnthecamerao,open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Deleting Characters
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
The previous character will be deleted.
● Choosing [
] and holding down the
[ ]buttonwilldeletevecharactersat
a time.
Returning to the Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
32
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
● Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● Whenthecameraiso,pressandholdthe[ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
33
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Forfullyautomaticselectionoftheoptimalsettingsforspecicscenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject.
The camera will make a slight clicking
noise as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and
image stabilization mode are displayed
in the upper left of the screen
(
=
37,
=
38).
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
34
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
whenyouhaveraisedtheash,itres
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Oncerecordingbegins,takeyournger
othemoviebutton.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the range of
focus (2).)
● Tozoominoroutquickly,movethezoom
lever all the way toward [
] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice after focusing,
and frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
● Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
● If[Raisetheash]isdisplayed,move
the [
]switchtoraisetheash.Itwillre
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
theash,pushitdownwithyournger,
into the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
35
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) to shoot a still image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode,
or operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
● Digestmoviequalityis[ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
143).
● Digestmoviesaresavedasseparatemovielesinthefollowing
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- Thedigestmovielesizereachesapproximately4GB,orthe
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and
40 seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
96).
- Daylight saving time (
=
19) or time zone (
=
144) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
148).
● Recordedshuttersoundscannotbemodiedorerased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
107).
3) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● Theashringduringshotsindicatesthatthecamerahas
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images.
The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(
=
108).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
33) to compose the shot and
focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
55).
Movies
● Keepyourngersawayfromthemicrophone(1)whilerecording
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recordedormaycausetherecordingtosoundmued.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
andsubjectsareenlargedtoallowforcorrectionofsignicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (
=
53).
(
1
)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
90).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [
] button. To activate
sounds, press the [
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ ]
tab, and then press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Disable].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● Ifyourshotsaredarkdespitetheashring,moveclosertothe
subject.Fordetailsontheashrange,see“Flash”(
=
181).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Lens” (
=
181).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicatesthatshootingisnotpossibleuntiltheashhasnished
recharging.Shootingcanresumeassoonastheashisready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait,
or release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
37) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
38,
=
44) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
51).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
whentheashissetto[
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
46).Conrmbeforehandthatthedateandtime
are correct (
=
19).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
70) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
withyourexpectedeect,color,orbrightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
38).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
38
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS). For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ]
image stabilization is also applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● Tocancelimagestabilization,set[ISMode]to[O](
=
83).
In this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● [
] is not available in [ ] mode.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If the icon
for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed when
you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or [ ] is
displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
TheAF-assistbeamandtheashwillnotre,
and the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus,imagebrightness,andcoloraredeterminedbytherst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
choose [
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
39
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 160x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
50), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
70) if no frames are displayed,
if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames
are displayed on the background or similar areas.
40
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [
] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [
] button.
● To adjust the area displayed when the [
] button is pressed,
access MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [ Display Area], and
choose one of the three options.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(
=
43).
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement
(Auto Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
=
77) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera
automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be adjusted,
as needed.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode.
● Press and release the [ ]buttonquickly.
● [
] is displayed.
● A white frame is displayed around the
detected face, and the camera zooms
in and out to keep the subject on the
screen.
● When multiple faces are detected, a
white frame is displayed around the main
subject’s face and up to two gray frames
around other faces, as the camera zooms
to keep these subjects on the screen.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[DigitalZoom]>[O].
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
Still Images
Movies
Ifyoulosetrackofasubjectwhilezoomedin,youcannditmoreeasily
by temporarily zooming out.
1
Look for the lost subject.
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
● The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [
] button.
2
Reacquire the subject.
● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
● Thepreviousmagnicationisnow
restored, so that the area within the white
framellsthescreenagain.
● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [
] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
41
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
● When Auto is on, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose the desired option.
● The camera zooms automatically to keep
facesatthespeciedsize.
Auto
Autozoomtopreventsubjectsfrommovingothe
screen.
When multiple faces are detected, the camera zooms
to keep these subjects on the screen.
Face
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Upper Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Whole Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Manual
Keepfacesatthesizespeciedbymovingthezoom
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size
has been obtained.
● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (
=
29) > [ ]
tab > [
Auto Settings] > [ AutoZoom].Youcanchoose[O]
to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“EasilyReacquiringSubjectswithAutoZooming(SeekAssist)”
(
=
42).
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
● Youcanclearyourspeciedfacesizeduringmovierecordingby
pressing the [
] button.
● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
2
Shoot.
● Auto zooming continues even after you
shoot, and the frames are still displayed.
● To cancel auto zooming, press the [
]
button again. [ Auto:O]isdisplayed.
● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
● When
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
andsomeshootingsettingscannotbecongured.
● Auto zooming to keep multiple subjects on the screen is not
performed during movie recording, even if faces are detected.
● Auto zooming is not performed during continuous shooting.
● If multiple faces are detected in step 1, you can switch the main
face used for auto zooming by pressing the [
] button.
● When a detected subject moves toward the edge of the screen,
the camera zooms out to keep the subject on the screen.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
43).
● The camera prioritizes zooming to keep subjects on the screen.
For this reason, it may not be possible to maintain a constant
face display size, depending on subject movement and shooting
conditions.
● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level
and stops zooming until a face is detected.
42
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
● When the feature described in “Auto Zooming in Response to
Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (
=
40) is deactivated, [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, and the camera automatically
zooms out when moved.
● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)”
(
=
40), choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [ Auto
Settings]>[SeekAssist]>[O].
Adding a Date Stamp
Still Images
Movies
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.
However,notethatdatestampscannotbeeditedorremoved,soconrm
beforehand that the date and time are correct (
=
19).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Date
Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Date &
Time] or [Date] (
=
29).
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out,whichmakesiteasiertondthesubject.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode (=
40).
2
Look for the lost subject.
● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
helpyoundit.
3
Reacquire the subject.
● Onceyoundthesubjectandstop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
4
Shoot.
● To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto:O]isdisplayed.
43
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a
self-timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remainlitincasetheashres.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
2
Shoot.
● As you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[O]instep1.
● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one
as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already
have one may cause it to be printed twice.
- Print using printer functions (
=
158)
- Use camera DPOF print settings (
=
161) to print
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website
(
=
155) to print
44
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
yourspecieddelaytime,butspecifyingthenumberofshotshas
noeect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and color tone
aredeterminedbytherstshot.Moretimeisrequiredbetween
shotswhentheashresorwhenyouhavespeciedtotake
many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory
card becomes full.
● Whenadelaylongerthantwosecondsisspecied,twoseconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up.(Thelampwillremainlitincasetheashres.)
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (
=
182).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressingtheshutterbutton,itwillnotaectyourshot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) to shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) to shoot.
45
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
Thisfunctionisalsousefulwhensearchingforaspecicregistered
person among a large number of images (
=
91).
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when
creating Story Highlights albums (
=
108).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
49).
● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
43).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shootingmayslowdowniftheashres.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
33) is not available. Similarly,
[Hg Lamp Corr.] (
=
51)issetto[O]andcannotbechanged.
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
andonlytherstimageinthatgroupwillbedisplayed.Toindicatethat
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
98), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
92) and
ungrouped (
=
92).
● Protecting (
=
96) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (
=
91)orSmartShue(
=
95). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
93), magnifying (
=
94),
tagging as favorites (
=
101), editing (
=
102), printing
(
=
157), setting up individual image printing (
=
161), or
adding to a photobook (
=
163). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
92) or cancel grouping
(
=
92)rst.
46
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● After [Register?] is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The[EditProle]screenisdisplayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
30).
● Toregisterabirthday,onthe[EditProle]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
● Whennished,pressthe[
] button.
4
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
● After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to
12 people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
● A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
47
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
imageorscenediersdrasticallyfromtheregisteredface
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
93).
● Becausefacesofbabiesandchildrenchangequicklyasthey
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
46).
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [
] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose[O].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
88).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
44,
=
80)
continuetoberecordedinthesamepositionastherstshot,
even if subjects move.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
5
Continue registering face
information.
● To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● Theashwillnotrewhenfollowingstep2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
37) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
youhavenotlledall5faceinfoslots(
=
46).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
● When you point the camera toward people,
the names of up to 3 registered people will
be displayed when they are detected.
● Shoot.
● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
48
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children,
astheirfaceschangequicklyastheygrow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person whose face info you want to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
● Ifveitemsoffaceinfohavealready
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Iflessthanveitemsoffaceinfoare
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the person whose
information you want to check or edit, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
● To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole](eitherpressthe[ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
46).
● To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. To erase face information,
press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Evenifyouchangenamesin[EditProle],thenamesrecordedin
previously shot images will remain the same.
49
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) and choose
[Erase Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person to erase, and then press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
90), overwrite their info (
=
93), or
search for images that include them (
=
91).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
93).
4
Register face information.
● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● Youcannotaddfaceinformationifall5informationslotsarelled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
anyfaceinformation.Insteadofoverwritingfaceinfo,rsterase
unwanted existing info (
=
47), and then register new face
information (
=
46) as needed.
50
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose the image’s number of recording pixels from 4 levels, as follows.
Forguidelinesonhowmanyshotsateachrecordingpixelsettingcant
on a memory card, see “Recording” (
=
182).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting
Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Sameaspectratioas35mmlm,usedforprintingimagesat
5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on
standard-denitiontelevisionsorsimilardisplaydevices.Alsoused
for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Squareaspectratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
51
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Threeimagequalitysettingsareavailable.Forguidelinesonthetotal
recordingtimeformoviesateachlevelofimagequalitythatwilltona
memory card, see “Recording” (
=
182).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD.
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in standard
denition.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the
top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not
recorded.
● In [
] mode, [ ]isalsoavailable,oeringsmoothermotion
(
=
67).
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge.
This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting,
using Multi-area White Balance.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Hg Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
processbutchoose[O].
● Afteryouarenishedshootingundermercurylamps,youshould
set[HgLampCorr.]backto[O].Otherwise,greenhuesnot
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
44),thissettingissetto[O]and
cannot be changed.
52
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose
[Disable].
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (
=
29).
● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (
=
53).
Helpful Shooting Features
Displaying Grid Lines
Still Images
Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
reference while shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Grid Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
processbutchoose[O].
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
53
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
ofsignicantcamerashake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto level.
● Set [
Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(
=
52).
● Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
53) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
29).
● Youcanalsoset[ISMode]to[O],sothatsubjectsarerecorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [DynamicIS]isnotavailablewhen[ISMode]issetto[O]
(
=
53).
● Only[Standard]isavailablewhenthemoviequalityissetto
[
].
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating Image Stabilization
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
setimagestabilizationto[O]todeactivateit.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[IS Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], and then
choose[O]bypressingthe[ ][ ]
buttons.
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
38).
O Deactivates image stabilization.
54
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
29).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist Beam] on the [ ] tab,
andthenchoose[O](
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eyewhentheashisusedinlow-lightshots.
1
Access the [Flash settings] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Flash settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then press the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose[O](
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
55).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
processbutchoose[O].
O Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
171).
● When [Display Time] (
=
55)issetto[O]or[Quick],[Display
Info]issetto[O]andcannotbechanged.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [
] button, or protect (
=
96) or tag
images as favorites (
=
101) by pressing the [ ] button.
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Display Time] and press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displaysimagesforthespeciedtime.Evenwhilethe
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
O No image display after shots.
56
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Applying Eects Automatically
(Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applyingspecialeectsandrecomposingtheshottoemphasizethe
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiplestillimageswitheectsusingcamera-determinedsettings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. You can choose an image
for full-screen display by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button.
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
Shootmoreeectivelyinvariousscenes,andtakeshotsenhancedwith
uniqueimageeectsorcapturedusingspecialfunctions
57
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Movies with a Variety of Eects
Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you
recordmovies,andltersandeectssuchasplaybackinsloworfast
motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few
movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot
movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Record the rst movie.
● Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate
the elapsed time.
● Recording stops automatically in
3 – 6 seconds.
3
Record the second to fourth movies.
● Repeat step 2 three times to record
four movies.
● Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot
moviewillbesavedasaseparateleoncethedatechanges.
● Eectsaregenerallyappliedconsistentlytomovies1–4,butyou
canalsochangetheeectineachmovie(
=
57).
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
107).
Creative Shot Movie Playback
You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ]
mode (
=
89).
● Shootingwilltakesometimewhentheashres,butholdthe
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
92).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Choosing Eects
Youcanchooseeectsforimagescapturedin[ ] mode.
● After choosing [
] mode, press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dialtochoosetheeect,andthenpress
the [ ] button.
Auto
Alleects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Shoot.
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all the
way down with background defocus set
to [Auto], the camera shoots twice and
processes the images.
Smooth skin
eect
Choose from three levels of skin smoothing.
Skin smoothing is optimized for the main subject’s
face.
Brightness Choosefromvelevelsofbrightness.
Background
Defocus
Defocus the background.
● Areasotherthanpeople’sskinmaybemodied,dependingon
the shooting conditions.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
● In [ ]ashmode,backgrounddefocusingissetto[O]and
cannot be changed.
● The time left before shooting is shown on the top of the screen
when you activate the self-timer by selecting [
], or by selecting
[
] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
Shooting Yourself under Optimal
Settings (Self Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to access the setting
screen for smooth skin and brightness.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
setting item, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
value as you watch the screen.
● Background defocus can also be
disabled. After you choose [
] in step 1,
press the [ ] button.
3
Open the screen.
● Open the screen as shown.
59
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automaticallycongurethesettingsforoptimalshots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
28).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening
eect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Focus.
● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
3
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● For details on the shooting range in [
] mode, see “Lens”
(
=
181).
● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer.
● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
● Continuous shooting is not available in [
] Auto mode (
=
40).
60
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Applying Special Eects
Addavarietyofeectstoimageswhenshooting.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) to choose a shooting mode.
2
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors
(Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Eect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ]modes,trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomake
sure you obtain the desired results.
Shooting under Low Light
(Low Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vividshotsofreworks.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
youshouldset[ISMode]to[O]whenusingatripodorother
means to secure the camera (
=
83).
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
33).
● [
] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and
cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
61
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Eect
(Fish-Eye Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Shootwiththedistortingeectofash-eyelens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
● Press the [ ]button,chooseaneect
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
lookwiththeeectapplied.
3
Shoot.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
Shooting with a Skin Smoothing Eect
(Smooth Skin)
Still Images
Movies
Processes images to make skin look smoother.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
● Press the [ ]button,chooseaneect
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
lookwiththeeectapplied.
3
Shoot.
● Areasotherthanpeople’sskinmaybemodied,dependingon
the shooting conditions.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
62
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical
or vice-versa), press the [
][ ] buttons in step 2. You can move
the frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movieimagequalityis[
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
50).Thesequalitysettingscannot
be changed.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Createstheeectofaminiaturemodel,byblurringimageareasabove
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objectsinthescenewillmovequicklyduringplayback.Notethatsoundis
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [
][ ] buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose the speed by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
63
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with a Soft Focus Eect
Still Images
Movies
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoshootimagesasifasoftfocuslterwere
attachedtothecamera.Youcanadjusttheeectlevelasdesired.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
● Press the [ ]button,chooseaneect
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
lookwiththeeectapplied.
3
Shoot.
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Eect
(Toy Camera Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Thiseectmakesimagesresembleshotsfromatoycamerabyvignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
lookwiththeeectapplied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthe
desired results.
64
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)
Still Images
Movies
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
● Each time the camera detects a smile,
it will shoot after the lamp lights up.
● To pause smile detection, press the
[
] button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
lookwiththeeectapplied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
65
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Face the camera and wink.
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
● Switchtoanothermodewhenyounishshooting,orthecamera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [
] button.
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
66
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speedup.(Whentheashres,thelamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
77). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
67
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Movies with Smoother Motion
Shoot movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate,
as follows.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Movie
Image Quality” (
=
51) to choose
[ ].
Locking or Changing Image Brightness
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in
1/3-stop increments within a range of -2 to +2 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
● To unlock the exposure, press the [
]
button again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
3
Shoot (=
67).
Recording Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Recording Movies in Standard Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
172).
3
Shoot.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
68
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ ] tab,
and then choose [Disable] (
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
● Auto slow shutter is only available for [ ] movies.
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard],
and subjects are further enlarged.
● Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (
=
53) to choose
[High].
● [DynamicIS]isnotavailablewhen[ISMode]issetto[O]
(
=
53).
● Only[Standard]isavailablewhenthemoviequalityissetto
[
].
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind.
Inthiscase,youcandeactivatethewindlter.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Wind Filter] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose[O](
=
29).
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However,inquietenvironments,itlowersthesound-recordinglevel.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
29).
69
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Eects
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
● Themoviequalityis[
] (
=
51) and cannot be changed.
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode
Still Images
Movies
Applyplaybackeectstobriefclipsofafewseconds,suchasfastmotion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
108).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [
] (
=
28).
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback eect.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Turn the [
] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [
][ ] buttons
tosettheplaybackeect.
3
Shoot (=
67).
● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
70
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
71 – =
83), and then shoot.
● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
72)oractivatingtheash(ifsubjectsaredark,
=
81),
which may enable optimum exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
28) and MENU
(
=
29) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (
=
172).
71
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE
Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -2 to +2.
● Press the [
] button. As you watch
the screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
againwhennished.
● Thecorrectionlevelyouspeciedisnow
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.Insucientoverallimagecontrastcanalsobeautomatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Auto] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
● You can also correct existing images (
=
104).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
mayreducesubjectandcamerashakeandincreasetheash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
73
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
73) to
choose [ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Fluorescent Forshootingunderwhiteuorescentlighting.
Fluorescent H Forshootingunderdaylightuorescentlighting.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
73).
74
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● White balance (
=
73) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
74) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
● Forstronger/moreintenseeects
(or darker skin tones), adjust the value
totheright,andforweaker/lightereects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
● Press the [
] button to complete
the setting.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
MyColorsO
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
CombinestheeectsofVividBlue,Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positivelm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
andotherqualitiesasdesired(
=
74).
75
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near
thepositionyouspecied.Fordetailsontherangeoffocus,see“Lens”
(
=
181).
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position)andthemagnieddisplay,press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to specify the general focal position, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Toadjustthemagnication,pressthe[
]
button.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to have
thecamerane-tunethefocalposition
(Safety MF).
(
1
)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ].
For details on the range of focus, see “Lens” (
=
181).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Iftheashres,vignettingmayoccur.
● In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [
] will turn
gray and the camera will not focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
44).
76
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[MF Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab,
and then choose [On] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Chooseamenuitemtocongure,and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (
=
77) is
[Center] and AF frame size (
=
77) is [Normal], and these
settings cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
39) or
digital tele-converter (
=
77),butthemagnieddisplaywillnot
appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● Youcanenlargeorhidethemagnieddisplayareabyadjusting
MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● Todeactivateautomaticfocusne-tuningwhentheshutter
button is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[SafetyMF]>[O].
77
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Center
Still Images
Movies
OneAFframeisdisplayedinthecenter.Eectiveforreliablefocusing.
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [
] tab to [Small] (
=
29).
● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (
=
39) or digital tele-converter (
=
77), and in manual
focus mode (
=
75).
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
inacorner,rstaimthecameratocapturethesubjectinanAF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
29).
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● Theshutterspeedmaybeequivalentwhenyoumovethezoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
39).
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[AF Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
29).
78
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
] button
again.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
[ ] changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(
=
79).
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
● [Servo AF] (
=
79) is set to [Enable] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [
] is not available.
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
● When shooting in [
] mode (
=
75), press and hold the [ ]
button for at least one second.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded
in the still images (
=
45). However, when you choose a
registered person as the subject, their name is displayed.
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
79) is set to
[Enable], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen
when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Facesinprole,atanangle,orpartlyhidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the
AF Frame Mode” (
=
77) to choose
[Tracking AF].
● [
] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
79
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (
=
29).
Enable
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Disable
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Servo AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (
=
29).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
speciedAFframemode.
● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
43).
80
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (
=
182).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● The images are managed together as a
group (
=
92).
● In [ ] mode (
=
59), manual focus mode (
=
75), or when
AF is locked (
=
80), [ ] is changed to [ ].
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
43).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shootingmayslowdowniftheashres.
● Continuous shooting is not available in [
] Auto mode (
=
40),
even if you choose [
].
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
notchangeevenwhenyoureleaseyourngerfromtheshutterbutton.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
● To unlock the focus, after you release the
shutter button, press the [
] button again
and choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial).
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
81
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slowershutterspeedtoilluminatebackgroundsoutofashrange.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
youshouldset[ISMode]to[O]whenusingatripodorother
means to secure the camera (
=
83).
● In [
]mode,evenaftertheashres,ensurethatthemain
subjectdoesnotmoveuntiltheshuttersoundisnishedplaying.
O
Forshootingwithouttheash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep
it still.
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
Youcanchangetheashmodetomatchtheshootingscene.Fordetails
ontheashrange,see“Flash”(
=
181).
1
Raise the ash.
● Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ]button,chooseaash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
whentheashislowered.Movethe[
]switchtoraisetheash,
thencongurethesetting.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
82
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
71),youcanlocktheexposureforash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
81).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● Theashres,andwhen
[
]isdisplayed,theashoutputlevelis
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE: Flash Exposure
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
71), you can adjust the
ashexposurefrom-2to+2stops,in1/3-stopincrements.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (
=
28).
● Thecorrectionlevelyouspeciedisnow
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjuststheshutterspeedoraperturevalueforashshotsto
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
29) and
choosing [
]tab>[Flashsettings]>[SafetyFE]>[O].
● Youcanalsoconguretheashexposurecompensationby
accessing MENU (
=
29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash
settings] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Flash settings] MENU screen (
=
29)
whentheashisupbypressingthe[
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
83
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case,set[ISMode]to[O].
● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
tonamemorycard,see“Recording”(
=
182).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Youcankeepimagestabilizationountilthemomentyoushoot.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
53) and choose
[Shoot Only].
84
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (
=
181).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.
● Inconditionsrequiringslowershutterspeeds,theremaybea
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[ISMode]to[O](
=
83).
● Maximumshutterspeedwiththeashis1/2000second.Ifyou
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]
and cannot be changed.
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
85).
● [ ]: Time value
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
85
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter”
(
=
181) and “Aperture” (
=
181).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter
speed (1) or aperture value (2), and turn
the [ ] dial to specify a value.
● An exposure level mark (4) based on
yourspeciedvaluesisshownonthe
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the optimum exposure (3).
● The exposure level mark is shown in
orangewhenthedierencefromoptimum
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
181).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
● In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and
set [Safety shift] on the [
] tab to [On] (
=
29) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However,safetyshiftisdisabledwhentheashres.
86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choosefromthethreeashlevelsin[ ] mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (
=
28).
● Oncethesettingiscomplete,theash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium,
[ ]: Maximum
● YoucanalsosettheashlevelbyaccessingMENU(
=
29)
and choosing [
] tab > [Flash settings] > [Flash Output].
● Youcanalsosettheashlevelin[
] or [ ] mode by
accessing MENU (
=
29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash
settings] > [Flash Mode] > [Manual].
● You can also access the [Flash settings] MENU screen (
=
29)
whentheashisupbypressingthe[
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screenbrightnessmaychangedependingonyourspecied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remainsthesamewhentheashisupandthemodeissetto[
].
● To have the setting that is not chosen in step 2 (whether shutter
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain
optimum exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the
[
] button. Note that optimum exposure may not be possible with
some settings.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]
and cannot be changed.
● [
] Auto mode is not available in [ ] mode.
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculationofoptimumexposureisbasedonthespecied
metering method (
=
71).
87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browsethroughimagesquickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
88
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (
=
171).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
GPS Information Display
● Moviesareidentiedbya[
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● Afterthemovieisnished,[
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab
>[ScrollDisplay]>[O].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Resume] >
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
29)andchooseyourdesiredeectonthe[ ] tab >
[TransitionEect].
(
1
)
89
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot
Mode (Creative Shot Movies)
Still Images
Movies
Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ] mode (
=
56).
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [ ]
tab (
=
29).
2
Play the movie.
● Select a movie and press the [ ] button
to play it.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-outhighlightsintheimageashonthescreenindetailed
information display (
=
88).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information display
(
=
88) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
● Still images and movies you shoot can be
geotagged using GPS information (such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation)
from a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
(
=
136). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
90
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[List/Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab,
and then choose a date (
=
29).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
88),
thenamesofuptovedetectedpeopleregisteredinFaceID(
=
45)
will be displayed.
● Press the [
] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [
][ ] buttons or turn
the [
] dial to choose an image.
● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Face ID Info] >
[NameDisplay]>[O].
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
35) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a still image labeled with
[ ].
2
Play the digest movie.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
] in the menu (
=
28).
● The digest movie recorded automatically
on the day of still image shooting is
played back from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
88).
91
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Finddesiredimagesquicklyonamemorycardfullofimagesbyltering
imagedisplayaccordingtoyourspeciedconditions.Youcanalsoprotect
(
=
96) or delete (
=
98) these images all at once.
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
46).
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
Displaystheimagesshotonaspecicdate.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
101).
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (
=
35).
1
Choose a search condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a condition (
=
28).
● When you have selected [
], [ ], or
[ ], choose the condition by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.
2
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons,
or turn the [ ] dial.
● Tocancelltereddisplay,choose[
] in
step 1.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
Bydisplayingmultipleimagesinanindex,youcanquicklyndtheimages
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● Todeactivatethe3Ddisplayeect(shownifyouholddownthe
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ]tab>[IndexEect]>[O].
92
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
View images in the group
individually.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
● To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
28).
● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly“NavigatingthroughImagesinanIndex”(
=
91) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
94). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
96), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (
=
98), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
161),
or [Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
163).
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Group Images]
>[O].However,groupedimagescannotbeungroupedduring
individual playback.
● Simultaneous display in [
] mode as described in step 2 of
“Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot” (
=
56) is only
shown immediately after you shoot.
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 2.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
91), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
94), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
94). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
96) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
98), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
161),
or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
163).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
102 –
=
106), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot continuously (
=
44,
=
59,
=
80) and images shot in
[ ] mode (
=
56)aregrouped,andonlytherstimageisdisplayed.
However, you can also view the images individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
93
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Choose the editing option.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
● On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
93), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by
Face ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have
been erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
90),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Each image is displayed for about three seconds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
26) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or
fast-rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● Inltereddisplay(
=
91), only images matching search
conditions are played.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You can
magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
● Youcanreturntosingle-imagedisplayfrommagnieddisplayby
pressing the [
] button.
(
1
)
95
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shue)
Still Images
Movies
Basedonthecurrentimage,thecameraoersfourimagesthatyoumay
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
oersfourmoreimages.Thisisanenjoyablewaytoplaybackimagesin
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots,
in many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shue.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
● Four candidate images are displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● SmartShueisnotavailableinthefollowingcases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Imagesareshowninltereddisplay(
=
91)
- During group playback (
=
92)
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Chooseamenuitemtocongure,and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
96
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose an option as desired (
=
29).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
96), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ]button.Aconrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turnthecameraobeforenishingthesetupprocessinstep3.
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
98).
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28). [Protected]
is displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
146).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function.Toerasethemthisway,rstcancelprotection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
97
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Youcanalsochoosetherstorlastimagebyturningthe[ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
96), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
96), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Imagesbeforetherstimagecannotbe
selected as the last image.
98
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
96) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose the desired item (
=
29).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
96) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
99
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
98), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
97) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
98), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
98), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
96), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ]button.Aconrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
100
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Auto Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and
thenchoose[O](
=
29).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
100) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to[O].Additionally,imagesalreadyrotatedwillbedisplayedin
the original orientation.
● InSmartShue(
=
95) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to[O],imagesshotverticallywillbedisplayedvertically,and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete
the setting.
● Rotationisnotpossiblewhen[AutoRotate]issetto[O]
(
=
100).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
101
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ]button.Aconrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
modeorturnthecameraobeforenishingthesetupprocessin
step 3.
● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
108).
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
categoryinlteredplayback,youcanrestrictthefollowingoperationsto
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
87), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
94), “Protecting
Images” (
=
96), “Erasing Images” (
=
98), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
161), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
163)
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
● To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
102
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Theimageisnowsavedasanewle.
5
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
50).
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
● Choosing [Original image] in step 5 will display the original image.
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
Youcanspecifyaportionofanimagetosaveasaseparateimagele.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
102 –
=
104) is only available when the
memorycardhassucientfreespace.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
103
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separatele.Fordetailsoneachoption,see“ChangingImageColor
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
74).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
102).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the number of recording
pixels after cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. Turn the [
] dial to switch frames,
which position the cropping area.
● Press the [
] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
102).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
50) or resized to [ ] (
=
102).
(
1
) (
3
)(
2
)
104
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
102).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automaticallycorrectsimagesaectedbyred-eye.Youcansavethe
correctedimageasaseparatele.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
29).
● Imagequalityofpicturesyourepeatedlyeditthiswaywillbe
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
74).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detectedandautomaticallyadjustedtotheoptimalbrightness.Insucient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
imageasaseparatele.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
105
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies,
=
35).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
87), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identiedby[
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
94).
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Theimageisnowsavedasanewle.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
102).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
106
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Reducing File Sizes
Movielesizescanbereducedbycompressingmoviesasfollows.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
● [
] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Themovieisnowsavedasanewle.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● Ifthememorycardlackssucientspace,only[Overwrite]willbe
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
107
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Albums with background music (
=
109) cannot be edited.
● [
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Erasing Movie Chapters
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
35,
=
57) recorded in [ ] or [ ]
mode can be erased. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Play a short movie as described in
steps 1 – 2 of “Viewing Short Movies
Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies)” (
=
89) or
“Viewing Short Movies Created When
Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)”
(
=
90), and then press the [ ] button
to access the movie control panel.
● To choose the clip, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ]
or [ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
108
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
1
Choose an image.
● Choose an image in single-image display.
● Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
● Choose a person, [Date], or [Event]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial) as the album theme, and then
press the [ ] button.
● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save Album as Movie],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (=
87).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create
an album of automatically selected images that match the theme.
These images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short
movie of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creatingalbumsalsorequiresfreespaceonthememorycard.
As a guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher,
and ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose themes for
the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the camera
is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (
=
101) to albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject
shot during the same month as the image displayed before
you access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom
Includesimagesbasedonyourspeciedimages,dates,
or people registered in Face ID.
109
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The screen at left is displayed when you
use a new or recently formatted memory
card. Choose [OK], press [ ], and
wait until the seven types of music are
registered to the card, which takes about
four minutes.
● When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
108) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music
settings.
● Choose an item, press the [ ] button,
and choose an option (
=
29).
4
Save the album.
● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
108) to save albums.
● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
107).
● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
35)
- Short movie clips (
=
69) of two seconds or longer, or
Creative Shot movies (
=
57), except compressed movies
● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
● To jump to the next chapter during the preview, press the [
]
button, and to jump to the previous chapter, press the [
] button.
● Youcanspecifythecoloreectinstep4bychoosing[Change
ColorEect]andpressingthe[
] button. To preview how the
albumlookswithyourselectedeectapplied,choose[Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [
][ ]
buttonstochooseacoloreectandpressingthe[
] button.
● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [
] button again.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
108), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
110
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose background music.
● When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
109),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color eect.
● On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (
=
108),
choose[ChangeColorEect].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
coloreect,andthenpressthe[ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
108) to save albums.
● Youcanspecifyupto40les(or10movieles)afterchoosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed.
To use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes].
The previous stills, clips, or Creative Shot movies are labeled with
[
], and multiple images are displayed.
● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
● Thecoloreectmaynotbeappliedtosomeimages.
● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
108), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose album elements.
● Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
● Press the [
] button after you
nishselectingstillimages,shortclips,
or Creative Shot movies in [Image
Selection], dates in [Date Selection],
or people in [Person Selection].
111
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Preview the movie.
● Choose [Preview] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
4
Save the movie.
● Choose [Save], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the movie.
● Choose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
● Choose the movie to play and press the
[
] button.
● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [ ] on the
screen in step 2.
● To rearrange clips, press the [
] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [
] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
● Toapplyacoloreect,choose[ChangeColorEect]onthe
screen in step 3.
● To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (
=
109).
● Theimagequalityofmoviessavedis[
].
● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Combining Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (
=
108).
1
Access the editing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Short Clip Mix] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (
=
29).
2
Specify clips to combine.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a clip on the top of the
screen to combine, and then press the
[ ] button.
● Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again.
● Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
● Afteryouarenishedselectingclips,
press the [
] button.
112
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Available Wireless Features
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have
Wi-Fi functions. Remote live view shooting is also possible from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected
via Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Using Bluetooth
®
Features
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth low
energy technology*. You can also shoot, view, or geotag images by using
your smartphone as a remote control.
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
Wireless Features
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
● Before using wireless features, be sure to read “Precautions for
Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)” (
=
187).
113
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
1
Install Camera Connect.
● ForAndroidsmartphones,ndCamera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
● ForaniPhoneoriPad,ndCamera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Register a nickname.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
● Press the [
] button to access the
keyboard (
=
30), and then enter a
nickname.
● To return to [Wireless settings] after
pressing the [
] button, press the
[ ] button again.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via Bluetooth
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
bypairingthem.Thissimpliestransferringimagestoasmartphone.
● Connect via NFC (
=
115)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
117)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Press the [ ] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
7
Transfer images.
● The camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
● On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
● Use the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
● Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
becausepowerisconsumedevenwhenthecameraiso.
● Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic
devicesisrestricted,set[Bluetooth]to[O],toavoidhavingthe
camerareadyforBluetoothcommunicationevenwhenitiso.
3
Prepare for pairing.
● Choose [Bluetooth settings], press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Pairing], and then press the [ ]
button.
● A screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
4
Start Camera Connect.
● Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
● After the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
● Choose the camera nickname.
● Complete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
6
Complete pairing.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dialtochoose[OK]aftertheconrmation
message on the camera, and then press
the [ ] button.
115
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is O or in
Shooting Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
● Refer to the smartphone user manual to
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.
● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks (
) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
2
Establish the connection.
● Makesurethecameraisoorin
Shooting mode.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
● The camera screen automatically
changes.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
● The devices are connected automatically.
● Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
[
] Connected, [ ] Disconnected
● You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
● To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● IfthecameraisoorinShootingmodewhenthedevicesaretouched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
while viewing a shooting screen on the smartphone (
=
136). It’s easy
to reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
toacamerathatisoorinShootingmode.
116
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone.
This may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
togetherinslightlydierentpositions.Ifconnectionisnot
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- Ifyouattemptconnectionwhenthecameraiso,amessage
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
139).
● Connectionsrequirethatamemorycardbeinthecamera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
140).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
132).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab
>[Wirelesssettings]>[Wi-FiSettings]>[NFC]>[O].
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
● When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
4
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmationscreen(eitherpressthe
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
117
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
119).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● ForAndroidsmartphones,ndCamera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
● ForaniPhoneoriPad,ndCamera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
115).
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
● Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
115) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to send,
and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● Afteryounishchoosingimages,press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The images are now sent.
● Ifduringconnectionamessageonthecamerarequestsyouto
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Transferring Images to an
NFC-Compatible Smartphone” (
=
115) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
132).
118
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
9
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [
]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select], and then press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [
] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [
] button to mark it
as selected ([
]), and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[
] button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmationscreen(eitherpressthe
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [
] button.
You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
● The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
● Inthepasswordeld,enterthepassword
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Select the camera to connect to.
● On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[
] button.
● You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
119
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
117).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to an access point.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
122).
● For non-WPS access points, follow
steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed
Access Points” (
=
124) to connect to
the access point.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
139).
● Connectionsrequirethatamemorycardbeinthecamera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinationswillbelistedrstwhenyouaccesstheWi-Fimenu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ]buttons,andthencongurethesetting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[TargetHistory]>[O].
● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password]>[O].[Password]isnolongerdisplayedontheSSID
screen (in step 4).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
132).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 9.
120
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via Wi-Fi,
systemrequirements,andothercompatibilityinformation(including
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
requireaseparatedownloadandinstallationofWindowsMedia
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing CameraWindow
1
Download the software.
● Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
● Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
● On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
6
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
● Follow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
117)toconguretheprivacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
117).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
119) from step 4.
121
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
OnacomputerrunningWindows,congurethefollowingsettingsbefore
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screeninstructionsandcongurethe
setting.
● ThefollowingWindowssettingsareconguredwhenyourunthe
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
Thiswillenablethecameratosee(nd)thecomputertoaccess
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
Thiswillenablethecomputertosee(nd)thecamera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
2
Follow the instructions displayed.
● Double-clickthedownloadedleto
install it.
● Internetaccessisrequired,andanyISPaccountchargesand
access fees must be paid separately.
● To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
- Windows: Select [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
122
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as
“access points”.
● IfyouuseMACaddresslteringonyourWi-Finetwork,besure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi.YoucanuseeitherPushButtonCongurationMethodorPIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
ConrmthattheWi-FirouterorbasestationconformstotheWi-Fi
standards in “Interface” (
=
183).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
122) or not (
=
124).
For non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication /
data encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security.
Exerciseadequatecautionwhenchangingthesesettings.
123
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
● Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Connect with WPS].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Connect with WPS], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [WPS (PBC mode)].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS (PBC mode)], and
then press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
124
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinationswillbelistedrstwhenyouaccesstheWi-Fimenu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ]buttons,andthencongurethesetting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[TargetHistory]>[O].
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
141).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Todisconnectfromthecamera,turnothecamera.
● If you chose [WPS (PIN mode)] in step 6, a PIN code will be
displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access
point. Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
122).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
10
Display CameraWindow.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow
by clicking [Downloads Images From
Canon Camera].
11
Import images.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
● To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
125
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
122).
● Toconnecttoadeviceviaanaccesspoint,conrmthatthetarget
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
122).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
122)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
124) from step 2.
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
122).
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
126
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note that
you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphonetoreceiveanoticationmessageforcompletinglinkage
settings.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
● Read the agreement displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [ ]
button.
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
requiredtocompletecamerasettingsforCANONiMAGEGATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(MicrosoftInternetExplorer,etc.)requirements,includingsettingsand
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website
(http://www.canon.com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details,
check the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
127
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
7
Check for the notication message.
● Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receiveanoticationmessageatthe
email address entered in step 5.
● Press the [
] button on the next screen,
whichindicatesthatnoticationhasbeen
sent.
● [
] now changes to [ ].
8
Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
● From a computer or smartphone,
accessthepagelinkedinthenotication
message.
● Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● [
] (
=
134) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
● You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (
=
128).
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
122) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
124).
5
Enter your email address.
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
a screen is displayed for entering an
email address.
● Enter your email address, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
● Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
128
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● Ifanyconguredsettingschange,followthesestepsagainto
update the camera settings.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Choose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
applicationisnotconguredtoblockemailfromrelevantdomains,
whichmaypreventyoufromreceivingthenoticationmessage.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (
=
126).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu,
recentdestinationswillbelistedrstwhenyouaccessthemenu.
Press the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen
andthencongurethesetting.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
● From a computer or smartphone,
access http://www.canon.com/cig/
to visit CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● On the computer or smartphone,
display the Web service settings screen.
● Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
129
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
119).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
3
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
● Press the [
] button to return to the
playback screen once [OK] is displayed
after the image is sent.
● Connectionsrequirethatamemorycardwithsavedimagesbein
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
132).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
130
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Connectionsrequirethatamemorycardwithsavedimagesbein
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinationswillbelistedrstwhenyouaccesstheWi-Fimenu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ]buttons,andthencongurethesetting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[TargetHistory]>[O].
● To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password]>[O].[Password]isnolongerdisplayedontheSSID
screen (in step 3).
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
119).
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
● Inthepasswordeld,enterthepassword
displayed on the camera.
5
Choose the printer.
● Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
157).
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button,choose[OK]ontheconrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
131
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmationscreen(eitherpressthe
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
132
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
On the image transfer screen, specify a range of images to send, or send
only images tagged as favorites.
1
Choose [Select and send].
● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
● Connectionsrequirethatamemorycardbeinthecamera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinationswillbelistedrstwhenyouaccesstheWi-Fimenu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ]buttons,andthencongurethesetting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[TargetHistory]>[O].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
132).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
133
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
106), a separate,
compressedleissentinsteadoftheoriginalle.Notethatthismay
delaytransmission,andthelecannotbesentunlessthereisenough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
qualityvariesdependingonthesmartphone.Fordetails,refertothe
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
132), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
97) to specify images.
● To include movies, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
101).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
132), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[
] button to remove [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
134
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
installandcongureImageTransferUtility,freesoftwarecompatiblewith
Image Sync.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
126).
● To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
126), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● ImagesizecanalsobeconguredinMENU(
=
29) > [ ] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
andsymbolsthatcanbeenteredmaydierdependingontheWebservice.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
30).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them.
The same comment is added to all images sent together.
135
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
Ifthecomputerthatyouintendtosendimagestoisturnedo,theimages
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading
Images to Web Services” (
=
128) and
choose [ ].
● Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
iso.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack.
● Evenifimageswereimportedtothecomputerthroughadierent
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY,
so the computer must be connected to the Internet.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Preparing the Computer
Installandcongurethesoftwareonthedestinationcomputer.
1
Install Image Transfer Utility.
● Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(
=
155) by following steps 1 – 2 of
“Installing CameraWindow” (
=
120).
● Image Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
126).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
],
and then click [Add new camera].
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed.
Choose the camera from which images
are to be sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images,
the icon changes to [
].
136
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images as you shoot (
=
136)
● Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
138)
● Privacysettingsmustbeconguredinadvancetoallowimage
viewing on the smartphone (
=
117,
=
139).
Geotagging Images When You Shoot
Still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged using GPS
information (such as latitude, longitude, and elevation) from a Bluetooth
enabled smartphone. You can review the recorded GPS information on
the camera (
=
89). Using the software (
=
155), you can also view
the locations on a map, with the still images and movies shown next
to them.
1
Connect the camera and
smartphone via Bluetooth (=
113).
2
Choose [GPS settings].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [GPS
settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a
Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
135).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
126), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Congure the setting.
● Choose [GPS via Mobile], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Enable].
4
Shoot.
● The still images and movies you shoot
are now geotagged using smartphone
GPS information, which you can check as
described in “GPS Information Display”
(
=
89).
● Next time, after starting Camera Connect
on your smartphone, make sure the
camera and smartphone are connected
via Bluetooth before shooting.
● Images are not geotagged this way unless Camera Connect is
running.
● TheGPSinformationaddedtoyourmovieisacquiredinitially,
when you start shooting.
● GPSinformationcannotbeupdatedunlessWi-Fiiso.
● The GPS information added to images in remote live view
shootingisacquiredinitially,whenyouswitchtoaWi-Fi
connection.
● Images may not be geotagged if you connect via NFC or
Bluetoothwhenthecameraiso.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
● TochecktheGPSinformationacquiredfromthesmartphone,
choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [GPS settings] > [GPS
information display].
● GPSacquisitionstatusisindicatedbyoneofthefollowingicons.
[
]Acquiring,[ ]Notacquiring
138
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
You can shoot as you view a shooting screen on your smartphone.
● Privacysettingsmustbeconguredinadvancetoallowviewing
of all images from the smartphone (
=
117).
1
Secure the camera.
● Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
117).
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote live view shooting.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
● Once the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the ON/OFF button are disabled.
4
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Focusing may take longer.
● Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
● Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connectionenvironmentwillnotaectrecordedimages.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display.
Thisisconvenientifyouwanttoconnectquicklywhileshooting,orifyou
will control playback while connected to a TV.
1
Prepare the camera.
● Set the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
● Keep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
113).
● Make sure that the Bluetooth connection
has been established.
3
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
● The smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
139
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
4
Shoot and switch images.
● Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
● [Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
● You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
icon on the screen (
=
113).
140
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed
from smartphones connected to the camera.
● Choose [View Settings] in step 4
of “Editing Connection Information”
(
=
139) and choose the desired option.
● For remote live view shooting, choose [On].
CongurableItems
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
140)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
117)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
140)
O O O O
–
O
:Congurable
–
:Notcongurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
139), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Selecttheinputeldandpressthe[
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
30).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
139), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings.
Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset camera] on the [
] tab (
=
149).
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Nickname].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
3
Change the nickname.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
30), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
]buttonandenteradierent
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screendisplayedwhenyourstuseWi-Fi.Inthiscase,selectthe
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Clearing Information of Devices
Paired via Bluetooth
Beforepairingwithadierentsmartphone,cleartheinformationaboutany
connected smartphones.
1
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
settings].
2
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
● Choose [Check/clear connection info],
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Clear the information.
● On the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
● After [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Clear the camera information.
● In the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
143
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basiccamerafunctionsareconguredonthe[ ] tab of the MENU
(
=
29). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose
[Enable].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
87) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
144
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
170).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
20) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
28) or
MENU (
=
29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[O].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
145
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
PowerDownandDisplayO,respectively)asneeded(
=
26).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[AutoPowerDown]and[1min.]orlessfor[DisplayO].
● The[DisplayO]settingisappliedevenifyouset[AutoPower
Down]to[O].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
145) to [On].
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
● Choose [Disp. Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
25). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
Whenthecameraisnotinuse,thescreenquicklydarkenstoreduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
170).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
afterdarkening,thescreenturnso.
Thecameraturnsoafterapproximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shootingwhenthescreenisobutthe
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
146
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Whenformattingisnished,[Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
● Formattingorerasingdataonamemorycardonlychangesle
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when
in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness]
setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or restart
the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose[O].
147
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
File Numbering
Yourshotsareautomaticallynumberedinsequentialorder(0001–9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
howthecameraassignslenumbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose the desired option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
146) memory card.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error]
is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/
writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording
suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card.
Before low-level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a
computer, or take other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
146), press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
146) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
146), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
148
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Checking Certication Logos
Somelogosforcerticationrequirementsmetbythecameracanbe
viewedonthescreen.Othercerticationlogosareprintedinthisguide,
on the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose[CerticationLogoDisplay],
and then press the [
] button.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language,
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
33),
the MF indicator (
=
75), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
149
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
45)
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
144), [Time Zone] (
=
144),
[Language
] (
=
148), and [Video System] (
=
152)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
73)
- Shooting mode chosen in [
] (
=
59) mode
- Movie mode (
=
67)
- Information registered in [Wireless settings] (
=
112)
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
● Face ID information
● Wireless settings
1
Access the [Other settings] screen.
● Choose [Reset camera] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Other settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Choose the function to reset.
● Choose the function to reset, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Default function settings are now
restored.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
152)
● [Wireless settings] (
=
112)
● [GPS settings] (
=
136)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Restoring All Camera Defaults
1
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
● Choose [Reset camera] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Basic settings], and then press
the [
] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● All camera defaults are now restored.
150
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
System Map
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LHE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
Included Accessories
Power
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)
*
3
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
Connect Station
CS100
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30E
151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LHE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
● The battery charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC
power (50/60 Hz).
● Forpoweroutletsinadierentformat,useacommercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required.NotethatCanonshallnotbeliableforanydamages
resultingfromaccidents,suchasmalfunctionorre,thatoccur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or
accidentssuchasre,etc.,causedbythemalfunctionofnon-genuine
Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack).
PleasenotethatanyrepairsyourCanonproductmayrequireasaresult
of such malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
171).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
qualityof[ ], [ ], or [ ]canbeviewedinhighdenition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV
are o.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30E
● Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU(soldseparately)isrequired
to connect the adapter to the camera.
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
153
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Inserting and Charging the
Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30E and Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
18)
to open the cover.
● Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
19).
● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to close the cover.
2
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
● Withthecameraturnedo,openthe
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
(
1
)
(
2
)
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
● Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● Whennished,turnothecameraand
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
154
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack,
see “Power” (
=
183).
● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (
=
23).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
● If the USB charge lamp is not lit, reconnect the interface cable.
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60Hz).Forpoweroutletsinadierentformat,usea
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
3
Charge the battery pack.
● CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
● Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
● Thelampturnsowhencharging
nishes.
● Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack
for charging.
155
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
134) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● To view and edit images on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with images captured by
the camera.
● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (
=
153). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. We recommend
using Interface Cable IFC-600PCU (sold separately).
● Withthecameraturnedo,openthe
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
● Charging now begins, and the indicator
on the back of the camera blinks in
green.Chargingwillbenishedinabout
four hours.
● However, charging may take longer if
you import images on the camera to
the computer, as described in “Saving
Images to a Computer” (
=
156).
● The indicator continues to blink in green
evenafterchargingisnished,aslongas
the camera is connected to the computer.
● Chargingstopsandtheindicatorgoesoif,afteryoubegin
charging as described above, you press the ON/OFF button to
turnthecamerao.
● Withsomecomputers,batterychargingmayrequirethememory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(
=
18) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB port.
156
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
● The camera automatically turns on when
you connect it to the computer.
2
Display CameraWindow.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
● Double-click [
].
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
Fordetailedsoftwaresystemrequirementsandcompatibilityinformation
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
Install the software as described in steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (
=
120).
● To uninstall (remove) the software in Mac OS, in the [Canon
Utilities] folder within the [Applications] folder, drag the folder of
the software for uninstallation to the Trash, and then empty the
Trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
● Withthecameraturnedo,openthe
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
(
1
)
(
2
)
157
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are o.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details,
refer to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turnthecamerao,andunplugthecable.
● To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
softwareinuse,orimagelesizes.
158
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
157) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Printsimageswiththelenumberadded.
Both
Printsimageswithboththedateandle
number added.
O
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
O
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
159).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
159).
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printingisnished.
● Whenyouarenishedprinting,turnthe
cameraandprinteroanddisconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
152).
159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● Afterfollowingstep1in“ConguringPrint
Settings” (
=
158) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Afterfollowingstep1in“ConguringPrint
Settings” (
=
158) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, turn the [
] dial.
● Whennished,pressthe[
] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
157)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
160
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
157) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing
method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on
a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder
number,lenumber,andelapsedtimefortheframeby
setting [Caption] to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (
=
87
), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [
] button.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Printsimagesforidenticationpurposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
159), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
159) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
161
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memorycardhasprintsettingsthatwereconguredonanother
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
19).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [
] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
162) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memorycardandcongurerelevantsettings,suchasthenumberof
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specifytheprintingformat,whethertoaddthedateorlenumber,
and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the
print list.
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Chooseandcongureitemsasdesired
(
=
29).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
O
–
File No.
On Imagesareprintedwiththelenumber.
O
–
Clear
DPOF data
On
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
O
–
162
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
161), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added to the
print list (
=
161 –
=
162), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints
(up to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
● Printingquantitycannotbespeciedfor
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● Whennished,pressthe[
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
161), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
97) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
161), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
163
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● Whennished,pressthe[
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
163), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
163), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and transferring them into the software on your
computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient
when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your
own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memorycardhasprintsettingsthatwereconguredonanother
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
163), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
164
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Ifyouthinkthereisaproblemwiththecamera,rstcheckthefollowing.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
● Conrmthatthebatterypackischarged(
=
18).
● Conrmthatthebatterypackisinsertedfacingthecorrectway(
=
18).
● Conrmthatthememorycard/batterycoverisfullyclosed(
=
18).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Thebatterypackrunsoutofpowerquickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover,turnthecameraon,andthenturnitoagain(
=
18).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
batteryswellingpreventsthebatterypackfromttinginthecamera,contacta
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (
=
152).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
165
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raisetheashandsettheashmodeto[ ] (
=
81).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
71).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
72,
=
104).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
71).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lowertheashandsettheashmodeto[ ] (
=
33).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
71).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
71).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shotslooktoodarkdespitetheashring(
=
36).
● Shootwithinashrange(
=
181).
● Adjustbrightnessbyusingashexposurecompensationorchangingtheash
output level (
=
82,
=
86).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
72).
Subjectsinashshotslooktoobright,highlightsarewashed-out.
● Shootwithinashrange(
=
181).
● Lowertheashandsettheashmodeto[
] (
=
33).
● Adjustbrightnessbyusingashexposurecompensationorchangingtheash
output level (
=
82,
=
86).
Whitespotsappearinashshots.
● Thisiscausedbylightfromtheashreectingodustorairborneparticles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
72).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
59).
Subjectsareaectedbyred-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
54). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
willlightupforashshots.Forbestresults,havesubjectslookatthered-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
104).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
87), press the shutter button halfway (
=
26).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- Thescreenmayickerandhorizontalbandingmayappearunderuorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
50).
No date stamp is added to images.
● Congurethe[DateStamp ] setting (
=
42). Note that date stamps are not
addedtoimagesautomatically,merelybecauseyouhaveconguredthe[Date/
Time] setting (
=
19).
● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (
=
178) in which [Date Stamp ]
cannotbecongured(
=
42).
[ ]ashesonthescreenwhentheshutterbuttonispressed,andshooting
is not possible (
=
36).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
36).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
83).
● Raisetheashandsettheashmodeto[
] (
=
81).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
72).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
youshouldset[ISMode]to[O]whenusingatripodorothermeanstosecure
the camera (
=
83).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
26).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
181).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
54).
● Conrmthatunneededfunctionssuchasmacroaredeactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
77,
=
80).
166
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
147).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skipifcomputerperformanceisinadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
143) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
143) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
62), [ ] (
=
69), or [ ]
(
=
56) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ ]
button.
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
● In simple information display mode (
=
88), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
108).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
25).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
147).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
172 –
=
175).
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
● The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (
=
45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (
=
46), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (
=
144).
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
146,
=
182).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● Thecamera’sinternalmemorybuerlledupasthecameracouldnotrecordto
thememorycardquicklyenough.Tryoneofthefollowingmeasures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
147).
- Lowertheimagequality(
=
51).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
182).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (
=
62), [ ] (
=
69),
and [
] (
=
56) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjectsthatpassinfrontofthecameraquicklymaylookdistorted.Thisisnota
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
lesoralterthefolderstructure.
167
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
134).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwaveovensorotherequipmentoperatingonthe2.4GHzband.Notethat
images may take a long time to send even when [
] is displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Nonoticationmessageisreceivedonacomputerorsmartphoneafter
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
● Checktheemailsettingsonthecomputerorsmartphone.Iftheyareconguredto
blockemailfromcertaindomains,youmaynotbeabletoreceivethenotication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
141).
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera.
Eraseunneededconnectioninformationfromthecamerarst,andthenaddnew
devices/destinations (
=
139).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
126).
● Toaddasmartphone,rstinstallthededicatedapplicationCameraConnecton
your smartphone (
=
117).
● Toaddacomputer,rstinstallthesoftwareCameraWindowonyourcomputer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
120,
=
122).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwaveovensorotherequipmentoperatingonthe2.4GHzband.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrmthattheaccesspointchannelissettoachannelsupportedbythe
camera (
=
183). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● Thedestinationdevicehasinsucientstoragespace.Increasethestoragespace
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
moveorrenameimagelesorfoldersonthecomputerthatreceivedimagessent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
134). Before moving or renaming
theseimagelesorfoldersonthecomputer,makesuretheimageshavealready
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
168
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannotmagnify!/CannotplaybackthiscontentinSmartShue/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Unselectable image./
Noidenticationinformation
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
93), Magnify* (
=
94),SmartShue*(
=
95), Rotate*
(
=
100), Favorites (
=
101), Edit* (
=
102), Print List* (
=
161), and
Photobook Set-up* (
=
163).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
97,
=
99,
=
162), you
attemptedtochooseaninitialimagethatwasafterthenalimage,orvice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
161) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
163). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
161) or Photobook Set-up (
=
163) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
96),
Erase (
=
98), Favorites (
=
101), Print List (
=
161), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
163).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
147), or format the memory card (
=
146).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequentdisplayofthiserrormessagemayindicatedamage.Inthiscase,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequentdisplayofthiserrormessagemayindicatedamage.Inthiscase,write
down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
18).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position.
Switch the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
18).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
18).
Memory card error (
=
147)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
18), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insucientspaceoncard
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
33,
=
56,
=
70,
=
84) or edit images (
=
102). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
98) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
18).
Charge the battery (
=
18)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
96)
UnidentiedImage/IncompatibleJPEG/Imagetoolarge./Cannotplayback
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
169
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
Receiving failed
Insucientspaceoncard
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memorycardwithsucientspace.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insucientspaceonserver
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
134) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
157) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
159). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● ContactaCanonCustomerSupportHelpDesktorequestassistancewithink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
122).
● Adevicecouldnotbefound.Turnthecameraoandonagain,andretrythe
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously.
Try reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
122).
IPaddressconict
● ResettheIPaddresssothatitdoesnotconictwithanother.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
170
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(22) AF frame (
=
77),
Spot AE point frame (
=
71)
(23) Date stamp (
=
42)
(24) i-Contrast (
=
72)
(25) AE lock (
=
71),
FE lock (
=
82)
(26) Shutter speed (
=
84,
=
85)
(27) Aperture value (
=
85)
(28) Exposure level (
=
85)
(29) ISO speed (
=
72)
(30) Grid lines (
=
52)
(31) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
35)
(32) Zoom bar (
=
33)
(33)
Auto (
=
40)
(34) Wind filter (
=
68)
(35) Time zone (
=
144)
(36) Image stabilization (
=
83)
(37)
Auto level (
=
52)
(38)
Auto slow shutter (
=
68)
(39) MF indicator (
=
75)
(40) Exposure compensation level
(
=
71)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sucientcharge
Slightlydepleted,butsucient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack
soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
9
)
(
8
)
(
13
)(
14
)(
15
) (
17
)(
16
) (
18
) (
19
)
(
20
)
(
22
)
(
34
)
(
33
)
(
39
)(
40
)
(
31
)
(
25
) (
26
) (
27
) (
28
) (
29
) (
30
)
(
35
)
(
36
)
(
32
)
(
10
)
(
37
) (
38
)
(
24
)
(
23
)
(
11
)
(
7
)
(
12
)
(
21
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
172),
Scene icon (
=
37)
(2) Flash mode (
=
81)
(3) Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level
(
=
82,
=
86)
(4) Metering method (
=
71)
(5) Drive mode (
=
80)
(6) Mercury lamp correction (
=
51)
(7) White balance (
=
73)
(8) Self-timer (
=
43)
(9) My Colors (
=
74)
(10) Eco mode (
=
145)
(11) Camera shake warning (
=
36)
(12) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
115)
(13) IS mode icon (
=
38)
(14) Battery level (
=
170)
(15) Still image compression (
=
83),
Recording pixel setting (
=
50)
(16) Recordable shots (
=
182)*
(17) Moviequality(
=
51)
(18) Remaining time (
=
182)
(19) Zoom magnification (
=
39),
Digital tele-converter (
=
77)
(20) Focus range (
=
75),
AF lock (
=
80)
(21) Connected via Bluetooth to a
smartphoneandacquiringGPS
information (
=
137)
171
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(28) Compression(imagequality)
(
=
83) / Recording pixel setting
(
=
50,
=
51), MP4 (movies)
(29) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (
=
182)
Movies: Playback time (
=
182)
(30) File size
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
152).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
87).
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
107) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
107) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie, Creative Shot movie,
or album movie is selected (
=
107))
Edit (
=
105)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
157).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
) (
3
) (
4
) (
5
)(
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
)(
10
) (
12
)
(
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
) (
17
)
(
18
)
(
24
) (
26
) (
28
)
(
25
) (
27
)
(
29
) (
30
)
(
19
) (
20
) (
21
) (
22
) (
23
)
(
11
)
(1) Movie playback (
=
33,
=
87),
Digest movie playback (
=
35)
(2) Current image no. /
Total no. of images
(3) Histogram (
=
89)
(4) Battery level (
=
170)
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
133)
(6) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
115)
(7) Image Sync (
=
134)
(8) Image editing (
=
102),
Movie compression (
=
106)
(9) Favorites (
=
101)
(10) Protection (
=
96)
(11) Folder number –
File number (
=
147)
(12) Shooting date/time (
=
19)
(13) Shooting mode (
=
172)
(14) Shutter speed (
=
84,
=
85)
(15) Aperture value (
=
85)
(16) Exposure compensation level
(
=
71)
(17) ISO speed (
=
72)
(18) Metering method (
=
71)
(19) Flash (
=
81), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
82)
(20) White balance (
=
73)
(21) Mercury lamp correction (
=
51)
(22) My Colors (
=
74,
=
103),
Creative Shot effect (
=
57)
(23) Focus range (
=
75)
(24) Red-eye correction (
=
104),
Short clip playback effect
(
=
69)
(25) i-Contrast (
=
72)
(26) Imagequality/Framerate
(movies) (
=
50,
=
51),
Albums (
=
108)
(27) Group playback (
=
92)
172
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (
=
71)
–
O O O
– – –
O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
– –
Flash (
=
81)
– – –
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – –
O
–
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
– – –
–
O
–
O
*2 *2
– – – – – – – –
*2
– – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Aperture Value (
=
85)
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shutter Speed (
=
85)
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Program Shift (
=
71)
–
*3 *3
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock (
=
71)/FE Lock (
=
82)*
4
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (
=
67)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
Focus Range (
=
75,
=
80)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
Screen Display
Information Display/No Information Display
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Tracking AF Subject Selection (
=
78)
O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
Change Shooting Display (
=
27)
O O O O O O
– –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – – – –
O O O O
–
*1 Set in [Brightness] (
=
58).
*2 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*3 Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.
*4 FE lock not available in [
]ashmode.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
173
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
FUNC. Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
Light Metering (
=
71)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
My Colors (
=
74)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / *
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / /
*
2
O O O O
– – – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O O
White Balance (
=
73)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / / /
O O O O
– – – – – – –
O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – –
O O
ISO Speed (
=
72)
AUTO
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shooting Mode (
=
59)
– – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer (
=
43)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
O O O O O O O
O
O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings (
=
44)
Delay*
3
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots*
4
O O O O
–
O
– –
O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
82)
–
O O O
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output Level (
=
86)
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red,
green, blue, and skin tone.
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number
of shots.
*4 Oneshot(cannotbemodied)inmodeswithoutselectionofthe
number of shots.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
174
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Drive Mode (
=
80)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
–
O
– – –
O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O O
– –
*
1
O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O
– –
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
50)
O O O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O
*2
O
O O O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – – –
O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*2
–
O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O
– –
O
– – – –
O O O
– –
Recording Pixels (
=
50)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
O O O O
–
O
– –
O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
Compression (
=
83)
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Movie Quality (
=
51)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O
–
*1 [ ] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
*2 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set
(
=
62).
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
175
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
AF Frame (
=
77)
Face AiAF*
1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O O
Tracking AF
O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
Center
O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
O O O O O
–
O O O O O
AF Frame Size (
=
77)*
2
Normal
O O O O
– – – – –
O
O – – – –
O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O
Small
O O O O
– – – – –
O
O – – – –
O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O O
Digital Zoom (
=
39)
Standard
O O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x/2.0x
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Servo AF (
=
79)
Enable
O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
Disable
O O O O O
*3
O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous AF (
=
79)
Enable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O
Disable
O O O O
– – –
O
–
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– –
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*3 [Enable] when subject movement is detected.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
176
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
AF-assist Beam (
=
54)
On
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF-Point Zoom (
=
75)
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2x/4x
O O O O
– – – – –
O
– – – – –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
Safety MF (
=
75)
On
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF Peaking Settings (
=
76)
Peaking
On
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Level Low/High
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
Color Red/Blue/Yellow
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
Flash settings (
=
54,
=
82,
=
86)
Flash Mode
Auto
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Manual
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Exp. Comp
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” in “FUNC. Menu” (
=
173).
Flash Output
See “Flash Output Level” in “FUNC. Menu” (
=
173).
Red-Eye Lamp On/O
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Safety FE
On
– O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
i-Contrast (
=
72)
Auto
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – –
O
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
51)
On
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
177
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Safety shift (
=
85)
On
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Wind Filter (
=
68)
Auto
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – –
O O
Attenuator (
=
68)
O/On
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Auto
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto slow shutter (=
68)
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Review image after shooting (
=
55)
Display Time
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Quick
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display Info
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Detailed
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Grid Lines (
=
52)
On/O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Reverse Display (
=
28)
On
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
IS Settings (
=
83)
IS Mode
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shoot Only
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
– –
Dynamic IS
Low
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
Standard
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
High
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
178
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Auto level (=
52)
Enable
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display Area (=
40)
Large/Medium/Small
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto Settings (=
40, =
42)
Seek Assist
On
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto Zoom
Face/Upper Body/Whole
Body/Manual/Auto
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Date Stamp
(=
42)
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Date / Date & Time
O O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Digest Type (
=
35)
Include Stills/No Stills
– – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Face ID Settings (
=
46)
Face ID
On
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
- When using Face ID (
=
45) in some modes or with some settings,
names of people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
179
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Tab
Item Reference Page
Play Creative Shot Movies
=
89
Short Clip Mix
=
111
Album Playback
=
108
List/Play Digest Movies
=
90
Slideshow
=
94
Erase
=
98
Protect
=
96
Rotate
=
100
Favorites
=
101
Photobook Set-up
=
163
i-Contrast
=
104
Red-Eye Correction
=
104
Cropping
=
102
Resize
=
102
My Colors
=
103
Face ID Info
=
90
TransitionEect
=
87
IndexEect
=
91
Scroll Display
=
87
Group Images
=
92
Auto Rotate
=
100
Resume
=
87
Set Up Tab
Item Reference Page
Mute
=
143
Volume
=
143
Hints & Tips
=
144
Date/Time
=
144
Time Zone
=
144
Lens Retraction
=
145
Eco Mode
=
145
Power Saving
=
26,
=
145
Disp. Brightness
=
145
Start-up Image
=
146
Format
=
146
File Numbering
=
147
Create Folder
=
148
Units
=
148
Video System
=
152
Wi-Fi connect’n
=
112
Wireless settings
=
112
GPS settings
=
136
CerticationLogoDisplay
=
148
Language
=
148
Reset camera
=
149
180
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generatestrongelectromagneticelds,whichmaycausemalfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Useablowerbrushtoremovedustfromthelens.Ifcleaningisdicult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container.
To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Print Tab
Item Reference Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
161
Select Range
=
162
Select All Images
=
162
Clear All Selections
=
162
Print Settings
=
161
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu
Item Reference Page
Rotate
=
100
Protect
=
96
Favorites
=
101
Print
=
157
Group Playback
=
92
Play Movie
=
87
Play Linked Digest Movie
=
90
SmartShue
=
95
Image Search
=
91
Slideshow
=
94
181
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings)
Max. Tv ......................................... 1 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/3200 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv ......................................... 15 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/3200 sec.
Available Tv values (sec.)
Shooting mode ............................. M mode / Tv mode
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2,
1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,
1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15,
1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640,
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200
Aperture
F number
Wide angle ........................................ 3.3‒8.0
Telephoto ..........................................6.9‒8.0
Flash
Built-in Flash
Flash Range (Max. wide angle)
closest point ..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (1.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. Approx. 4 m (13.1 ft.)
Flash Range (Telephoto end)
closest point ..................................Approx. 2 m (6.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. Approx. 2 m (6.6 ft.)
Specications
Image Sensor
Image size ........................................1/2.3 type
CameraEectivePixels
(Image processing may cause a
decrease in the number of pixels.)....Approx. 20.3 megapixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 21.1 megapixels
Lens
Focal Length
(35mmlmequivalent) .....................4.3‒172.0mm
(24‒960mm)
ZoomMagnication ..........................40x
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
*
–
1.0cm(0.4in.)‒innity 2m(6.6ft.)‒innity
Other than
the above
5.0cm(2.0in.)‒innity 2m(6.6ft.)‒innity
1.0 – 50.0 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
* Manual Focus is the same.
182
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording
File Format ............................................ DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Data Type
Still Image
Recording Format ......................... Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)
Image ............................................JPEG only
Movie
Recording Format ......................... MP4
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio ............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Recorded Pixels, Number of shots per a memory card
Still Image
Using a 16 GB (UHS-I) memory card (Approx. shots)
1766
2980
10798
3546
5925
9344
16755
53992
80988
Monitor
Type ......................................................TFTcolorliquidcrystal
Screen size ...........................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Eectivepixels ...................................... Approx. 0.92 million dots
Shooting
Digital zoom
Magnication.....................................Approx. 4x
Maximum with Optical Zoom ............Approx. 160x
Focal Length (Telephoto end,
35mmlmequivalent).......................Approx.3840mmequivalent
ZoomPlus
(Number of recording pixels L) .........Approx. 80x
Continuous Shooting
Shooting speed*
Auto/P Normal Continuous
Continuous shooting speed ...... Max approx. 5.9 shots/sec
P Continuous AF
Continuous shooting speed ...... Max approx. 4.6 shots/sec
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:
Tvvalue/Avvalue/Subjectconditions/Brightness/Shootingwithash/
Zoom positions/ Battery level
183
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Interface
Wired
Digital terminal
(Hi-Speed USB compliant)................Micro USB
HDMI OUT terminal ..........................Type D
Wireless
NFC .................................................. NFC Forum Type 3/4 Tag
compliant (Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards .................. Bluetooth Ver. 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Transmission method ...................GFSK modulation
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards .................. IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmissionfrequency
Frequency .................................2.4 GHz
Channels ..................................1 – 11ch
Security
Infrastructure mode .................. WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode ...... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ............................WPA2-PSK (AES)
Operating Environment
Temperature .......................................... Min. 0 °C, Max. 40 °C
(Min. 32 °F, Max. 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
W ..........................................................110.1 mm (4.3 in.)
H ...........................................................63.8 mm (2.5 in.)
D ...........................................................39.9 mm (1.6 in.)
Movie
Size
Recording
lesize
(Approx.)
Single Clip
Recording Time
(Approx.)
Recording time
per a memory card
(Approx.)
(1920 x 1080)
4288 KB/sec 29 min. 59 sec. 59 min. 30 sec.
(1920 x 1080)
2945 KB/sec 29 min. 59 sec. 1 hr. 26 min. 5 sec.
(1280 x 720)
992 KB/sec 29 min. 59 sec. 4 hr. 5 min. 15 sec.
(640 x 480)
382 KB/sec 59 min. 59 sec.
10 hr. 22 min.
35 sec.
● Continuous shooting is possible until the memory card becomes full
or the recording length for one movie reaches approx. 29 minutes
59 seconds.
Power
Battery Pack .........................................NB-13L
Number of still image shots (CIPA
compliant: room temperature 23 °C / 73 °F)
Approx. 250 shots
Number of still image shots
(Eco Mode On)
Approx. 355 shots
Movie recording time (CIPA compliant:
room temperature 23 °C / 73 °F)
Approx. 50 min.
Movie recording time
(Continuous Shooting)
Approx. 85 min.
Playback Time* Approx. 5 hr.
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images
184
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LHE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30E
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.* (when charged with
NB-13L in the camera)
* Charging time varies considerably depending on
the remaining battery level.
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card ........................................Approx. 300 g (approx. 10.6 oz.)
Camera Body Only ...............................Approx. 276 g (approx. 9.7 oz.)
185
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
A
Accessories 151
AE lock 71
AF frames 77
AF lock 80
Aspect ratio 50
Auto mode (shooting mode) 21, 33
Av (shooting mode) 85
B
Batteries
→
Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 145
Level 170
Power saving 26
Black and white images 74
Bluetooth 112
C
Camera access point mode 120
Camera Connect 113
CameraWindow 155
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 126
Center (AF frame mode) 77
Clock 32
Color (white balance) 73
Compressionratio(imagequality)83
Continuous shooting 38, 44
Creative shot 56
Custom white balance 73
D
Date/time
Changing 20
Date/time battery 20
Settings 19
World clock 144
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 77
Digital zoom 39
Display language 21
DPOF 161
E
Eco mode 145
Editing
i-Contrast 104
My Colors 103
Red-eye correction 104
Editing or erasing connection
information 139
Erasing 98
Error messages 168
Exposure
AE lock 71
Compensation 71
FE lock 82
F
Face ID 45
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 66
Favorites 101
FE lock 82
File numbering 147
Fireworks (shooting mode) 60
Fish-eyeeect(shootingmode)61
Flash
Deactivatingash81
Flash exposure compensation 82
On 81
Slow synchro 81
Focusing
AF frames 77
AF lock 80
MF peaking 76
Servo AF 79
Focus lock 77
Focus range
Macro 75
Manual focus 75
Framing assist 40
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 28
Table 173
G
Geotagging images 136
GPS information display 89
Grid lines 52
H
Handheld night scene
(shooting mode) 59
HDMI cable 152
I
i-Contrast 72, 104
Imagequality
→
Compression ratio
(imagequality)
Images
Display period 55
Erasing 98
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 96
Image stabilization 83
Image Sync 134
Indicator 31, 54
ISO speed 72
L
Low light (shooting mode) 60
M
M (shooting mode) 85
Macro (focus range) 75
Magnieddisplay94
Manual focus (focus range) 75
Memory cards 2
Recording time 182
Menu
Basic operations 29
Table 172
Mercury lamp correction 51
Metering method 71
Miniatureeect(shootingmode)62
Monochrome (shooting mode) 64
Movies
Editing 105
Recording time 182
Multi-area White Balance 51
My Colors 74, 103
P
P (shooting mode) 70
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 163
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 59
Postereect(shootingmode)60
186
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
V
Viewing 23
Image search 91
Index display 91
Magnieddisplay94
Single-image display 23
Slideshow 94
SmartShue95
TV display 152
W
White balance (color) 73
Wi-Fi functions 112
Wi-Fi menu 117
Windlter68
World clock 144
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom 21, 34, 39
Power 151
→
Battery charger,
→
Battery pack
Power saving 26
Printing 157
Program AE 70
Protecting 96
R
Recording pixels (image size) 50
Red-eye correction 104
Remote live view shooting 138
Reset all 149
Reset camera 149
Resizing images 102
Rotating 100
S
Saving images to a computer 156
Screen
Display language 21
Icons 170, 171
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 91
Self portrait (shooting mode) 58
Self-timer 43
2-second self-timer 44
Wink self-timer
(shooting mode) 65
Sending images 131
Sending images to
another camera 131
Sending images to a smartphone 113
Sending images to Web services 126
Sepia tone images 74
Servo AF 79
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 170
Short clips (movie mode) 69
Slideshow 94
SmartShue95
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 64
Smile (shooting mode) 64
Smooth skin (shooting mode) 61
Soft focus (shooting mode) 63
Software
Installation 120, 156
Saving images to
a computer 156
Sounds 143
Standard (movie mode) 67
Story Highlights 108
Strap 2, 17
Super vivid (shooting mode) 60
T
Terminal 157
Toycameraeect
(shooting mode) 63
Tracking AF 78
Traveling with the camera 144
Troubleshooting 164
TV display 152
Tv (shooting mode) 84
187
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
or Others)
● Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and
regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local
regulations. To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon
website to check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removingthecerticationlabelsfromtheproduct
● Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes
bringing them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in
Japan),exportorservicetransactionpermissionmayberequiredfrom
the Japanese government.
● Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased
duetoincorrectoperationoftheproduct,theeectsofradiowavesor
static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Please note that Canon
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it
for repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings
you have entered.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical
equipmentorotherelectronicequipment.
Useofthewirelessfunctionnearmedicalequipmentorother
electronicequipmentmayaectoperationofthosedevices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
morestringentthanwhenusingaLANcablearerequired.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
188
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Third-Party Software
● expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
acopyofthissoftwareandassociateddocumentationles(the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
andattempttoacquirethedatayouaresending.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
tocovertheirtrackswheninltratingothersystems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
189
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specicationsandappearance.
● Illustrationsandscreenshotsinthisguidemaydierslightlyfromthe
actualequipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
Personal Information and Security Precautions
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the
leakage of such information and settings.
● Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the
Face ID settings.
● Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset
Settings] in the Wi-Fi settings.
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI,theHDMIlogoandHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterfaceare
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Canon-PowerShot-SX730-HS
6
12
18

  • Bij bijna alles wat ik doe krijg ik steeds de melding”busy” met een handje. Wat ik ook doe ik kan dan niets meer. Apparaat is sinds1 week in mijn bezit. Weet iemand hoe ik dit oplos? Gesteld op 13-4-2019 om 13:57

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Ik heb ook dezelfde vraag...wat is busy????? Geantwoord op 6-12-2019 om 20:00

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Hallo, ik heb sinds kort de Canon Powershot SX730 HS gekocht, maar ik ben niet erg tevreden over de flitser in de instelling TV, met de Canon Powershot SX710 HS kon je de sluitertijd van de flitser in deze instelling veranderen. Dit kan nu niet meer, alleen in P. De flitser op minimum zetten is nog steeds te fel. Hoe kan ik dit nog veranderen/aanpassen in TV zodat deze niet meer zo fel is? Gesteld op 21-12-2018 om 00:05

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Waar kan ik de instelling AF vinden om te kunnen scherpstellen? Gesteld op 22-8-2018 om 22:06

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • hoi ik heb het gevonden op pagina 77 van de handleiding. Geantwoord op 26-8-2018 om 10:42

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • je kunt heel slecht het klepje openen om het kabeltje in het toestel te plaatsen om foto's op je PC over te brengen. wat is de makkelijk manier voordat ik de klep sloop. Gesteld op 21-8-2018 om 10:47

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • hoe kan ik foto s wissen van mijn toestel canon powershot sx730hs Gesteld op 19-8-2018 om 20:04

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Druk op het knopje links onder om je foto's te bekijken, ,Boven de draaiknop staat links ook een knopje, druk dan daar op en er komt erase in beeld. Daar kun je met naar links of rechts klikken om erase te selecteren. De desbetreffende foto wordt dan verwijderd Geantwoord op 23-8-2018 om 12:52

      Waardeer dit antwoord (14) Misbruik melden

  • Het lukt mij niet om een panoramafoto te maken. Waar stel ik de camera op in? Heeft iemand dat al eens gedaan?
    Gesteld op 31-7-2018 om 15:57

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
24

  • Ik snap niks van het automatisch scherpstellen. Pas na verschillende maken half indrukken van de afdruktoets komt er eens een groen scherpstelkadertje en dan vaak op een plek ie ik niet wil scherpstellen. Nou, dan is het fotomoment wel voorbij.
    Is er ook ergens een standaard scherpstelkader?
    Wat zijn jullie bevindingen hiermee?
    Mariannr Gesteld op 15-10-2017 om 19:32

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Heb je wel AF aanstaan? In welke modus staat je toestel?
      Bedenk wel dat het toestel soms moeite kan hebben als voorwerpen zich te dicht bij bevinden, of het te donker is, of als er te veel beweging is. Geantwoord op 16-12-2017 om 17:02

      Waardeer dit antwoord (1) Misbruik melden

  • Mijn ervaring is dezelfde en om deze reden vind ik het een slechte camera. Heel gebruiksonvriendelijk. Geantwoord op 16-12-2017 om 23:03

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Ik heb hetzelfde Ook problemen met scherpstellen
    Geantwoord op 17-7-2019 om 18:58

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • In het menu vind ik AF frame Daar zijn verschillende opties Ik heb het nu op centrum staan maar dat kan ik niet meer veranderen Pas als ik de camera gereset heb maar het lijkt me niet de bedoeling dat dat steeds moet Als je de optie wilt veranderen .
    Wie weet raad ?
    Groetjes Monique Geantwoord op 17-7-2019 om 19:02

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Ik krijg de wifi van mijn Canon Powershot sx 730 niet ingesteld om foto's van mijn fototoestel op mijn laptop te plaatsen. Telkens als ik op de wifi knop druk en laptop selecteer schakelt mijn toestel uit. Het vindt mijn laptop gewoon niet. Hoe los ik dit op? Gesteld op 3-10-2017 om 09:39

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Heb je wel de voorbereidende stappen op je laptop doorlopen? Die houden kortweg in 1) de nieuwste versie van "CameraWindow" installeren, 2) via Start > Programma's > Canon Utilities > "Wi-Fi Connection Setup" uitvoeren, en dan 3) via Start > Configuratiescherm > Apparaat Toevoegen kiezen, en daar je Canon SX730 kiezen, die je gedurende deze hele procedure AAN hebt staan, waarbij je op je camera het juiste Access Point (dat van je router) hebt gekozen. DAARNA kun je via Start > Programma's > Canon Utilities > CameraWindow uitvoeren, en zie je als het goed is de beelden van je camera op je laptop of PC.

      Net alsof je een USB naar micro-kabeltje gebruikt.

      Ik kwam er zelf pas uit toen ik deze video bekeek: “Canon PowerShot SX720 HS - Wireless Connection with a Windows Device”, Klik op deze LINK

      Geantwoord op 16-12-2017 om 16:57

      Waardeer dit antwoord (3) Misbruik melden

  • Ik heb het tot nu toe met kabeltje van mijn smartphone opgelost maar ga met deze uitleg aan de slag. Lijkt me toch een stuk handiger. Dankjewel. Geantwoord op 21-8-2019 om 14:27

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Mijn camera zijn WiFi doet het niet, Dus ik kan geen foto’s verzenden naar me iPhone Geantwoord op 20-3-2022 om 20:03

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Graag betekenis van tekentjes op de canon sx 730. Hs Gesteld op 29-8-2017 om 17:47

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Ik wil best helpen, maar welke tekentjes worden hier bedoeld? De symbolen die op het toestel zelf staan worden toch in de gebruikshandleiding op pdf weergegeven? Het voordeel daarvan is dat ze ook wat groter zijn weer te geven, want die tekentjes op het toestel zijn wel ongelofelijk klein, natuurlijk. Geantwoord op 16-12-2017 om 17:00

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon PowerShot SX730 HS bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon PowerShot SX730 HS in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 17,09 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon PowerShot SX730 HS

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 189 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 189 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Snelstart handleiding - English - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 189 pagina's

Canon PowerShot SX730 HS Snelstart handleiding - Français - 11 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info